البروجكتر التفاعلي

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪27 ......................................................................HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‪27 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪28 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪28 ..............................................................................................................HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VGA‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪29 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪9 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪30 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪31 ....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ‪9 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪31 .................................................................................................................................USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪9 ...................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪31 .............................................................................................................................USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪9 ..............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪31 ..................................................................................................................................USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪9 ...................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪32 ...................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪10 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪32 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪10 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪32 ...........................................................................................................................VGA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪32 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪11 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪33 ..................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪33 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‪11 ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‪12 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪36 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪13 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ‪37 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‪14 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪38 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪15 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪16 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪39‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪17 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪18 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪40 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪18 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪41 ..........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪21‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪42 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪22 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪43 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪45 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪22 .................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪46 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪23 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪24 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪46 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪46 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪25 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪48 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪25 .................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪25 .........................................................................VGA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪26 ....................................................................USB‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪78 .................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪51 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪81 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪52 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪81 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪52 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ(‪83 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪53 .............................................................................................Quick Corner‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻮﺱ‪55 ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻛﺴﺒﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺮﺡ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺒﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ(‪85 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪57 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪87 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪59 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪60 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪87 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪61 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪88 ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪63 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪90 .............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Easy Interactive Driver‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪91 .............................................................OS X‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪63 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪63 ...................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪92 ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪64 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪92 ...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪65 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﺒﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‪92 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻭﻟﻮﻧﻪ‪94 ........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪65 .........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺳﺒﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‪95 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪65 ....................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪95 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪65 .....................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪96 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪96 ..............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪67 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪97 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪67 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪99 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪69 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪99 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ‪70‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪100 ........................................Windows‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪71 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪100 .................................................................Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪72 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪101 ................................................................Windows‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪72 .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪102 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪72 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪74 ........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ‪102 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪74 ...................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺴﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪103 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪75 ..............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪77 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ‪104 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪104 ................................................................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪134 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪106‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪135 ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪135 ..............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪107 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪136 .................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ‪137 .......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪108 ..................................................................Split Screen‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪109 .....................................................................................................................Split Screen‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪138‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪110 ...........................................................PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪139 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪110 ..................................................................................................PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪139 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪110 ..........................................................................................PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪139 ...................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪111 .........................................................................................................PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪112 ...........................................................................................................PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪142 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪113 ..........................................................................................................................PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪142 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪115 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭ ًﻳﺎ‪143 ..........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪145 ........................................................................Windows‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪116 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪145 .................................................................................OS X‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪145 ........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪117 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪146 ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪147 ............................................................Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪118 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪148‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪119 .................................................................‬‬ ‫‪149 .............................................................................EasyMP Monitor‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪120 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪150 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪152 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪122 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪152 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪123 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪153 ......................................................................SNMP‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‪123 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪154 .................................................................. ESC/VP21‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪123 ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪124 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ‪154 .........................................................................................................................ESC/VP21‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪125 ...................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪154 .....................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪126 .................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪127 .................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ‪156 .........................................................................................PJLink‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪129 ..................................................................................................................................RGBCMY‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI3‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪131 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪133 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪133 ...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪133 ................................................................................................................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﻲ(‪182 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ‪157 ..................................................................Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪182 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪157 .....................................................................................................Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪183 ...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪157 ...................................................Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺧﻂﺃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‪184 .......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪158 ............................................................................................Crestron RoomView‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪159 ..........................................................................................Crestron RoomView Tools‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪185‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪160‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪186 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ‪187 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪161 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪188 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪162 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪189 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪162 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪189 ..................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪190 .................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\"‪163 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ\"‪164 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪193 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ\"‪165 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"‪167 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪193 .......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪196 .........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\" ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪169 .....................................................................\"Easy Interactive Function‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‪169 .................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪198 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪170 ...........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪199 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪200 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪171 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ‪200 ..............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪171 ......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪201 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪172 .............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺷﺒﻜﺔ\" ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ\"‪173 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ‪202‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺷﺒﻜﺔ\" ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ\"‪174 ................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Others‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪175 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪203 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ\"‪176 ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪204 ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪206 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪177 .........................................................\"ECO‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪207 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ\"‪179 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪207 ...................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪179 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪207 ................................................................USB Display‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪180 .....................................................................................................................Event ID‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪181 .................................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪219 ..................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ \"ﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ\"‪208 ..............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪219 ............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪208 ............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪219 ........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪208 .........................................................................................................Mac‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪219 ......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ \"ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ\"‪208 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪219 ......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪208 .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ‪220 ..............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪209 ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪209 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪221 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪209 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪210 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪223 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪210 ...............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪211 ...................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪225 ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪211 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪226 ..................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪212 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪227 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪212 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪212 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪229 .....................................................................USB Display‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪212 ........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ \"ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ\"‪213 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪230 ...................................................Easy Interactive Driver‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪214 ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ )ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟـ ‪231 .................................................(IEC60950-1 A2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ \"ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻂﺃ ﻓﻲ ‪214 ......................................\"Easy Interactive Function‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‪233 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪214 ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪214 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪235 ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪214 ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪215 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in accordance with‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻂﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪215 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫‪235 ..................................................................................................requirements of EU directive‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪215 ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪235 ........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪235 .................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪217 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪235 ......................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪236 ..........................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪217 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺰﻭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪236 ............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪217 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ‪217 ...................................Network Projection‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ‪218‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ‪219 .......................................................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ُﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻟﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﻴﺪًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ[‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Esc‬‬ ‫{‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫{ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉٍ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪9‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ\" ﺻـ‪11‬‬

‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪9‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ )‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-680Wi‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ\" ﺻـ‪9‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ\" ﺻـ‪9‬‬ ‫• ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ\" ﺻـ‪9‬‬ ‫• ُﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ )‪EB-695Wi‬‬ ‫‪.(EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi/‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪40‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ\" ﺻـ‪9‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ\" ﺻـ‪10‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ\" ﺻـ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫• ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪.(USB Display‬‬

‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‪ HDMI1/MHL‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ MHL‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﺒﱠﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Epson iProjection‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ EasyMP Multi PC Projection‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪App‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ Epson iProjection‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ Store‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Google play‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪ App Store‬ﺃﻭ ‪a.Google play‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪Epson‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪27‬‬ ‫ﻻ‪n‬ﺳ‪o‬ﻠ‪s‬ﻜﻴًﺎ‪E.p‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،802.11b/g/n‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ‬ ‫‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪802.11b/g/n‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ُﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )‪EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪http://www.epson.com/‬‬ ‫‪.(680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ELPDC06/ELPDC11/ELPDC12/ELPDC20‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ\" ﺻـ‪219‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ\" ﺻـ‪25‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ\" ﺻـ‪138‬‬

‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ‪11‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ EB-695Wi‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪11‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪12‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ\" ﺻـ‪13‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪14‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ\" ﺻـ‪15‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ\" ﺻـ‪16‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪17‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ\" ﺻـ‪18‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ\" ﺻـ‪18‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ِﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺑﻄﻪ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬

‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ‪12‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﺍ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺸﺎﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻌﻮﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺀ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺑﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﺰﻻﺝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ‪13‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒِﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫)‪EB-695Wi/EB-‬‬ ‫‪685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB‬‬ ‫‪(675Wi-‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒِﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪Microsaver‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.Kensington‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ(‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺭ ﱢﻛﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪Audio 1‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳُﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪. Computer1‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪Computer1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪Audio 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB-B‬‬ ‫ُﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪. Computer2‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI1/MHL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎﻭﺱ )‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ LAN‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) MHL‬ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP‬‬

‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ‪14‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‪Monitor Out/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ RGB‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Computer1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Computer2‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ < ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ I‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI2‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP‬‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮ ﱢﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ RS-232C‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪) .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪ K‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪RS-232C‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪SYNC IN/OUT‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫)‪EB-695Wi/EB-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB‬‬ ‫‪(675Wi-‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ M‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮ ّﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪TCH‬‬ ‫)‪EB-695Wi/EB-‬‬ ‫‪(680Wi‬‬ ‫‪PC‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻣًﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB-A‬‬ ‫‪.Free‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﱢﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ُﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ P‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪Video‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻳُﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.Video‬‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪Audio‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳُﺪ‪A‬ﺧ‪.‬ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪-USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ )ﺧﻤﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ُﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Mic‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪Audio Out‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻛﺒﻼً ﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻓ ًﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﺭ ًﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﺛ ﱢﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ُﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪Mic‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫)ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎﻥ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭ ﱢﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬

‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺭ ﱢﻛﺐ ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻗﺎﻘﺋﺎﺋﻤ ًﻴﺎﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺻﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ )ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Esc‬‬ ‫‪ ECO‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ Wide/Tele‬ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻛﱢﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳُﻜﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬ ‫‪ُ :‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Menu‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺤﺢ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Home‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪[ ] Power‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Home‬ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﺼﺎﻋ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪41‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ\"\" ﺻـ‪164‬‬ ‫• \"ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪204‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ\" ﺻـ‪52‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Source Search‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[ ] [Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔﻭ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ RGB‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪،Computer‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﺼﺎﻋﺪًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Enter‬‬

‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪[ ] Power‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﺼﺎﻋﺪًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Computer‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﱢﻝ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﻳﻦ ‪ Computer1‬ﻭ ‪. Computer2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ]‪[HDMI/Video‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﱢﻝ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﻳﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪.Video‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Num‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Auto‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ RGB‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪.Computer‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Aspect‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ G‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Num‬‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Menu‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ I‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ J‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[ ] [Enter‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ K‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[User‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ [Page] L‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‪–/+ [E-Zoom‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[A/V Mute‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﺼﺎﻋ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ]‪[Split‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Home‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Freeze‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺻﻌﻮ ًﺩﺍ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺰﻭﻻً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺧﻔﺾ ]‪ [Volume‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪.PC Free‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Home‬ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ T‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Pointer‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Esc‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒ ﱢﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﺯﺭ ]‪[Pen Mode‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[ID‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ X‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Color Mode‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﱠﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[Link Menu‬‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤ َﻮ َﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[LAN‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒ ﱢﺪﻝ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ USB Display‬ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB-A‬‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪ b‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Source Search‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ c‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﻌُﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺴﻴﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﺴﻦ ﺻﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ‪ EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ‪18‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ‪ EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻀﺒﻮ ًﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ‪ < Easy Interactive Function‬ﻋﺎﻡ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ\" ﺻـ‪200‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻛﱢﺐ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻧﻘﻄﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻔ ًﻼ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮًﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﺭ ًﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ M5‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ‪ EB-695Wi/EB-680Wi‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ‪19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﺮ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻣﻐﺎﻧﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﺎﻧﻂ ُﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻳ ًﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺯِﻟﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪TCH‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﱢﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪Microsaver‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.Kensington‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻐﻨﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ؛ ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﺮﺭٍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﻭﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ )ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ(‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ‪20‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮ ﱢﺻﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ‪ .EB-695Wi/EB-680Wi‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯﺓً ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪a.‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪22‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ\" ﺻـ‪25‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ\" ﺻـ‪36‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ\" ﺻـ‪37‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ\" ﺻـ‪38‬‬

‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪22‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ\" ﺻـ‪22‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪23‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪52‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ\" ﺻـ‪219‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘ ٍﻮ ﻭﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻘﻒ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﻌ ّﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻪ ﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﱢﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻧﺪ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ُﻳﺨﺪَﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺤﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﻄﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ُﻛﺘﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻛُﺘﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺮ ﱢﻛﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻞ؛ ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻨﻘﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺒ ًﺒﺎ ﺣﺎﺩ ًﺛﺎ ﻭﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎ ٍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺿﺪ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺯﻟﺰﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1500‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ < ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻎ‪.‬‬

‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‪/‬ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi‬‬ ‫‪.(EB-675Wi/‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒِﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺗﻪ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺮﻛﱢﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺫﺍﺴﺘﻛﻘﺎ ِﺒﻧﻞﺖﺍﻟﺍﻘﻟﻠﺒﻴﻢﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﺍﻟﻔﺎﻤﻋﺤﻠﻴﻲﻄﺔﻗﺮﻳﺳﺒًﺎﺎﻃﺃﻌﻛﺜﺔﺮﺃﻛﻣﺜﻤﺮﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻛﱢﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‪/‬ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ )ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤ ٍﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﱢﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘ ِﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺴ ًﺨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻃﻼﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ِﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮ ًﻧﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ؛‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻗﻮﺸ ًﻳﺎﻜ‪،‬ﻞﻣﺜﺳﻞﻠﻴﺍﻢﻷ‪.‬ﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﺠﻴﺠًﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻠﺴﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﱡﺝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭ ﱢﻛﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ [V Mute/‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻏﻴﱢﺮ‬ ‫• ﺑ ﱢﺪﻝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‪/‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫• ﺑ ﱢﺪﻝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‪/‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ‪ < Easy Interactive Function‬ﻋﺎﻡ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ\" ﺻـ‪24‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪46‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ\" ﺻـ‪33‬‬

‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪24‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛﱢﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ )‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-680Wi‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺛﺒﱢﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋ ﱢﻠﻘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮ ًﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻒ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻛﱢﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜ ٍﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ )ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ\" ﺻـ‪219‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪VGA‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﻮﺍﺀً ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪ ًﻣﺎ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ VGA‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧِﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Mac‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،VGA‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﺎﻱﺉ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪VGA‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮِ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮ ﱠﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،Monitor Out/Computer2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ < ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻳَﺼ ُﺪﺭ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪) USB‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ \"ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ\" ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.Epson‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ VGA‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪a.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Computer‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ\" ﺻـ‪25‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪c.VGA‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪27‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ\" ﺻـ‪28‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪31‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ\" ﺻـ‪32‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪32‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ\" ﺻـ‪33‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ\" ﺻـ‪219‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ \"VGA‬ﺻـ‪25‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ \"USB‬ﺻـ‪26‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ \"HDMI‬ﺻـ‪27‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB-B‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ Audio‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺷَ ﱢﻐﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ .USB Display‬ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Epson USB Display‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪d:‬‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪a.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Windows‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ EMP_UDSE.EXE‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮ ﱢﺯﻉ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪.Epson USB Display‬‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :OS X‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Epson USB Display‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،USB Display‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪USB Display/Easy Interactive Function‬‬ ‫‪Display Installer‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Epson USB‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ USB Display/‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ USB Type B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣُﺰﺩﻭﺟًﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫‪USB Display Setup‬‬ ‫‪ .Display‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ُﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫> ‪.EPSON_PJ_UD‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ‪USB Display Installer‬‬ ‫)‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪27‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ,‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Epson USB < EPSON Projector < All Programs‬‬ ‫‪.Epson USB Display Ver.x.xx < Display‬‬ ‫• ‪ :OS X‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭ ًﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ USB Display‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪.Application‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ .USB‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :OS X‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ USB Display‬ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ Dock‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ \"USB Display‬ﺻـ‪229‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻮ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 3,5‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫‪ Audio‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫َﻳﺼﺪُﺭ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫‪،HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪HDMI1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪HDMI2‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪HDMI3‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Mac‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻬﺎﻱﺉ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺑﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ Mac‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ )‪ 2009‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ( ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪a.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ MHL‬ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻳ ًﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ MHL‬ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﻨﱢﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.MHL‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪28‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ MHL‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Micro-USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI1/MHL‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ \"HDMI‬ﺻـ‪28‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VGA‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ\" ﺻـ‪29‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ\" ﺻـ‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ MHL‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ،MHL‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫َﻳﺼ ُﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻱﺉ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪ MHL‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺃﺫﻯ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ MHL‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪a.‬‬

‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺻﱠﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،Monitor Out/Computer2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ < ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳ ًﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ \"ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ\" ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓَ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Y‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Pb‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Pr‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Cb‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Cr‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﻰﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ VGA‬ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪ Computer‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻮ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫‪ Audio‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪HDMI1‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪HDMI2‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪HDMI3‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VGA‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺍﻟﺠﻔﻬﻴﺎﺪﺯﻳﺍﻮﻟ ﺍﻌﻟﺮﻤﺮﺽﻛ ﻣﺐ‪.‬ﺴﺘﺨﺪ ًﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪ VGA‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﻰﺀ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪c.VGA‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺫﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Video‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ Audio‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪e.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻂﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ Audio‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ\"\" ﺻـ‪164‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ RCA‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.A/V‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺫﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ \"ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ\" ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻّﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪a.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪31‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﻰﺀ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ُﻣﻠﺤَﻖ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB-A‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪b.‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ \"USB‬ﺻـ‪31‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ \"USB‬ﺻـ‪31‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• \"ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ \"USB‬ﺻـ‪31‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫• ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺑﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ TWAIN‬ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ(‬ ‫• ﻣﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ FAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪FAT32‬‬ ‫• ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﻢ )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ \"PC Free‬ﺻـ‪110‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB-A‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺍ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪.Computer1‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Computer1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Monitor Out‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ \"VGA‬ﺻـ‪32‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪32‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ\" ﺻـ‪33‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪VGA‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﱠﺻﻠﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ، Computer‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ECO‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ A/V‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ECO‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ A/V‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ < A/V‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ < ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )‪EB-695Wi‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .(EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi/‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Easy Interactive Tools‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻠﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Computer‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪33‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Mic‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‪b‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﺄﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﺒﻼً ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳ ًﺌﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Audio Out‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪d.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ Mic‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ SYNC‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ECO‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ A/V‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ SYNC IN‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪aSYNC‬‬ ‫‪ OUT‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Easy Interactive Function‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﱢﺻﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪b.‬‬

‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻠﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪f.[Enter‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ‪ < Easy Interactive Function‬ﻋﺎﻡ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪g.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪h.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏ ﱢﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ‪ < Easy Interactive Function‬ﻋﺎﻡ < ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ < ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻲ ‪ AA‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (-‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ ِﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ – ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﻬﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪b.‬‬

‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪c.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪.AA‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ– ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﻬﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ )‪ (+‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ )‪ (-‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪38‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪40‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪42‬‬ ‫• \"ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ\" ﺻـ‪43‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪45‬‬ ‫• \"ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪46‬‬ ‫• \"ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪48‬‬ ‫• \"ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪51‬‬ ‫• \"ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪52‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ\" ﺻـ‪59‬‬ ‫• \"ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪60‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪61‬‬ ‫• \"ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪63‬‬ ‫• \"ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ\" ﺻـ‪65‬‬ ‫• \"ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪67‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ\" ﺻـ‪69‬‬

‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Source Search‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﱢﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﻭﺻﱢﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ُﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺮﺭًﺍ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻭﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪b.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺗًﺎ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺣﻤﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺼﻬﺎﺭ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻳ ًﻀﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺲ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻐﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ A/V Mute‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻏ ﱢﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ ﺫﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) play‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻜﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﺑﻮﺟﻬﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺯﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺬﺭ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺟﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺸﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺒﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻮ ًﺭﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ,‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬ ‫{ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ\" ﺻـ‪41‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"‪ \"\"ECO‬ﺻـ‪177‬‬

‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ )‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻳﻨ ﱢﻔﺬ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Home‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻳ ًﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ I‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ,‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳ ًﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ )‪EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-‬‬ ‫‪.(680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ\" ﺻـ‪52‬‬ ‫• \"ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ \"ﻣﻤﺘﺪ\"\" ﺻـ‪167‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ\" ﺻـ‪146‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪161‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ\" ﺻـ‪206‬‬ ‫• \"ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ\" ﺻـ‪25‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ )‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪42‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﺮ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ‪) ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪b(.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﻴ ًﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Epson‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a‬‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ,‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪c‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪43‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.(EB-695Wi/EB-685Wi/EB-680Wi/EB-675Wi‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Enter‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪g.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Enter‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪h.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Enter‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‪i.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪j.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪f.[Enter‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪44‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[Enter‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪k.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪l.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‪m‬‬ ‫]‪.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪n.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪o.‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪45‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪f.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪46‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪b.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺏ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘ ًﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ\" ﺻـ‪46‬‬ ‫• \"ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ\" ﺻـ‪46‬‬ ‫• \"ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ\" ﺻـ‪22‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [A/V Mute‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ‪b.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [A/V Mute‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ‪c‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪47‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪e.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Menu‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪f.‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪48‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪c.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Menu‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪a.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪d.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪b.[Enter‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 4:3‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ 4:3‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪a.‬‬

‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣ ﱢﺮﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪f.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ‪e.‬‬

‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪ [Esc‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪h.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪g.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﺍﻓﻌﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬